blob: e9309cfe9eba03bb2a7f9b994e7f297301e16c7b [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau21475e32010-05-23 08:46:08 +02005 version 1.5
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau21475e32010-05-23 08:46:08 +02007 2010/05/23
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200808force-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100809fullconn X - X X
810grace X X X X
811hash-type X - X X
812http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
813http-request - X X X
814id - X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200815ignore-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100816log X X X X
817maxconn X X X -
818mode X X X X
819monitor fail - X X -
820monitor-net X X X -
821monitor-uri X X X -
822option abortonclose (*) X - X X
823option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
824option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
825option allbackups (*) X - X X
826option checkcache (*) X - X X
827option clitcpka (*) X X X -
828option contstats (*) X X X -
829option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
830option dontlognull (*) X X X -
831option forceclose (*) X X X X
832-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
833option forwardfor X X X X
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +0200834option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100835option http-server-close (*) X X X X
836option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
837option httpchk X - X X
838option httpclose (*) X X X X
839option httplog X X X X
840option http_proxy (*) X X X X
841option independant-streams (*) X X X X
842option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
843option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
844option logasap (*) X X X -
845option mysql-check X - X X
846option nolinger (*) X X X X
847option originalto X X X X
848option persist (*) X - X X
849option redispatch (*) X - X X
850option smtpchk X - X X
851option socket-stats (*) X X X -
852option splice-auto (*) X X X X
853option splice-request (*) X X X X
854option splice-response (*) X X X X
855option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
856option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
857-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
858option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
859option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
860option tcpka X X X X
861option tcplog X X X X
862option transparent (*) X - X X
863persist rdp-cookie X - X X
864rate-limit sessions X X X -
865redirect - X X X
866redisp (deprecated) X - X X
867redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
868reqadd - X X X
869reqallow - X X X
870reqdel - X X X
871reqdeny - X X X
872reqiallow - X X X
873reqidel - X X X
874reqideny - X X X
875reqipass - X X X
876reqirep - X X X
877reqisetbe - X X X
878reqitarpit - X X X
879reqpass - X X X
880reqrep - X X X
881-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
882reqsetbe - X X X
883reqtarpit - X X X
884retries X - X X
885rspadd - X X X
886rspdel - X X X
887rspdeny - X X X
888rspidel - X X X
889rspideny - X X X
890rspirep - X X X
891rsprep - X X X
892server - - X X
893source X - X X
894srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
895stats auth X - X X
896stats enable X - X X
897stats hide-version X - X X
898stats realm X - X X
899stats refresh X - X X
900stats scope X - X X
901stats show-desc X - X X
902stats show-legends X - X X
903stats show-node X - X X
904stats uri X - X X
905-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
906stick match - - X X
907stick on - - X X
908stick store-request - - X X
909stick-table - - X X
Willy Tarreau1a687942010-05-23 22:40:30 +0200910tcp-request accept - X X -
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100911tcp-request content accept - X X -
912tcp-request content reject - X X -
913tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Willy Tarreau1a687942010-05-23 22:40:30 +0200914tcp-request reject - X X -
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100915timeout check X - X X
916timeout client X X X -
917timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
918timeout connect X - X X
919timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
920timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
921timeout http-request X X X X
922timeout queue X - X X
923timeout server X - X X
924timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
925timeout tarpit X X X X
926transparent (deprecated) X - X X
927use_backend - X X -
928------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
929 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200930
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100931
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009324.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
933---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100934
935This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
936
937
938acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
939 Declare or complete an access list.
940 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
941 no | yes | yes | yes
942 Example:
943 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
944 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
945 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
946
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200947 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100948
949
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100950appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
951 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100952 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
953 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
954 no | no | yes | yes
955 Arguments :
956 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
957 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
958
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100959 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100960 checked in each cookie value.
961
962 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
963 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
964 milliseconds.
965
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200966 request-learn
967 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
968 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
969 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
970 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
971 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
972 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
973
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100974 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
975 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
976 data following this prefix.
977
978 Example :
979 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
980
981 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
982 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
983
984 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
985 2 modes are currently supported :
986 - path-parameters :
987 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
988 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
989 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
990 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
991 - query-string :
992 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
993 query string.
994
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100995 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
996 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
997 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
998 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100999 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
1000 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
1001 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001002 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
1003 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1004
1005 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1006
1007 Example :
1008 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1009
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001010 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick", "stick-table"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001011 and "ignore-persist"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001012
1013
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001014backlog <conns>
1015 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1016 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1017 yes | yes | yes | no
1018 Arguments :
1019 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1020 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1021 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1022
1023 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1024 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1025 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1026 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1027 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1028 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1029 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1030 backlog parameter.
1031
1032 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1033 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1034 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1035
1036 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1037
1038
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001039balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001040balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001041 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1042 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1043 yes | no | yes | yes
1044 Arguments :
1045 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1046 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1047 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1048 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1049
1050 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1051 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1052 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1053 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001054 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1055 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1056 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1057 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1058 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1059 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1060 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1061 it, so that you don't worry.
1062
1063 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1064 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1065 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1066 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1067 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1068 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1069 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1070 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001071
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001072 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1073 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1074 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1075 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1076 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1077 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1078 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1079 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1080
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001081 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1082 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1083 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1084 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1085 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1086 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1087 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1088 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001089 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001090 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001091 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1092 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1093 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001094
1095 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1096 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1097 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1098 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1099 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1100 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1101 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001102 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1103 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1104 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001105
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001106 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1107 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1108 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1109 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1110 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1111 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1112 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1113 URIs start with a leading "/".
1114
1115 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1116 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1117 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1118 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1119
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001120 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001121 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1122
1123 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1124 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1125 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1126 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1127 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1128 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1129 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1130 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1131 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1132 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1133 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1134 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1135 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1136 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1137 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1138 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1139 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1140 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1141 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1142 be randomly balanced if at all.
1143
1144 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1145 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1146 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1147 server will receive the request.
1148
1149 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1150 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1151 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1152 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1153 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001154 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1155 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1156 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001157
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001158 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1159 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1160 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001161 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001162 algorithm is applied instead.
1163
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001164 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001165 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1166 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1167 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1168
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001169 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1170 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1171 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1172
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001173 rdp-cookie
1174 rdp-cookie(name)
1175 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1176 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1177 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1178 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1179 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1180 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001181 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001182 used instead.
1183
1184 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1185 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1186 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1187 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1188
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001189 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1190 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1191 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1192
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001193 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001194 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1195 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001196
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001197 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001198 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001199
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001200 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1201 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1202 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001203
1204 Examples :
1205 balance roundrobin
1206 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001207 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001208 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1209 balance hdr(host)
1210 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001211
1212 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1213 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1214
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001215 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001216 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1217 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1218 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1219 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1220
1221 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1222 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1223 defaults to 16 kB.
1224
1225 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1226 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1227
1228 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1229 Round Robin.
1230
1231 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1232 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1233 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1234 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1235
1236 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1237
1238 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001239 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001240 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1241 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1242 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001243
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001244 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1245 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001246
1247
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1249bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1250bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1251bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1252bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1253bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1254bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001255 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1256 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1257 no | yes | yes | no
1258 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001259 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1260 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1261 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1262 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1263 special address "0.0.0.0".
1264
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001265 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1266 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1267 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1268 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1269 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1270 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1271 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1272 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1273 the range.
1274
1275 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1276 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1277 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1278 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1279 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1280 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1281 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1282 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1283 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001284
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001285 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1286 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1287 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1288 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1289 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1290 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1291 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1292 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1293 privileges.
1294
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001295 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1296 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1297 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1298 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1299 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1300 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1301 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1302 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1303
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001304 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1305 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1306 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1307 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001308
1309 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1310
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001311 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1312 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1313 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001314 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001315 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1316 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1317 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1318 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1319 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001320
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001321 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1322 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1323 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1324 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1325 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1326 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1327 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1328 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1329 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1330 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1331 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1332 with front firewalls which would see an established
1333 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1334
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001335 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1336 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1337 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1338 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1339 in a frontend.
1340
1341 Example :
1342 listen http_proxy
1343 bind :80,:443
1344 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1345
1346 See also : "source".
1347
1348
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001349bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1350 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1351 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1352 yes | yes | yes | yes
1353 Arguments :
1354 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1355 may be used to override a default value.
1356
1357 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1358 option may be combined with other numbers.
1359
1360 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1361 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1362 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1363 missing from all processes.
1364
1365 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1366 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1367 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1368 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1369
1370 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1371 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1372 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1373 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1374 and 'even' instances.
1375
1376 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1377 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1378 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1379 32.
1380
1381 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1382 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1383
1384 Example :
1385 listen app_ip1
1386 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1387 bind_process odd
1388
1389 listen app_ip2
1390 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1391 bind_process even
1392
1393 listen management
1394 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1395 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1396
1397 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1398
1399
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001400block { if | unless } <condition>
1401 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1402 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1403 no | yes | yes | yes
1404
1405 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1406 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001407 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001408 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1409 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1410 "block" statements per instance.
1411
1412 Example:
1413 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1414 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1415 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1416 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1417
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001418 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001419
1420
1421capture cookie <name> len <length>
1422 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1423 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1424 no | yes | yes | no
1425 Arguments :
1426 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1427 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1428 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1429 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1430 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1431
1432 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1433 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1434 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1435 right if it exceeds <length>.
1436
1437 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1438 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1439 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1440 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1441
1442 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1443 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1444 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1445
1446 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1447 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1448 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1449 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001450 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001451 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1452
1453 Example:
1454 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1455
1456 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001457 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001458
1459
1460capture request header <name> len <length>
1461 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1462 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1463 no | yes | yes | no
1464 Arguments :
1465 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001466 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001467 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1468 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1469 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1470
1471 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1472 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1473 it exceeds <length>.
1474
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001475 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001476 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1477 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001478 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1479 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1480 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1481 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001482 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001483 environments to find where the request came from.
1484
1485 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1486 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1487 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1488 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001489
1490 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1491 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1492 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1493 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1494
1495 Example:
1496 capture request header Host len 15
1497 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1498 capture request header Referrer len 15
1499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001500 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001501 about logging.
1502
1503
1504capture response header <name> len <length>
1505 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1506 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1507 no | yes | yes | no
1508 Arguments :
1509 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001510 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001511 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1512 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1513 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1514
1515 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1516 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1517 it exceeds <length>.
1518
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001519 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001520 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1521 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1522 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001523 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1524 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1525 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1526 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001527
1528 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1529 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1530 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1531 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1532
1533 Example:
1534 capture response header Content-length len 9
1535 capture response header Location len 15
1536
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001537 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001538 about logging.
1539
1540
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001541clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001542 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1543 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1544 yes | yes | yes | no
1545 Arguments :
1546 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1547 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1548 as explained at the top of this document.
1549
1550 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1551 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1552 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1553 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1554 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1555 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1556 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1557 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001558 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001559 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1560 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1561
1562 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1563 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1564 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1565 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1566 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1567 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1568
1569 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1570 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1571
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001572 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1573 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001574
1575
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001576contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001577 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1578 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1579 yes | no | yes | yes
1580 Arguments :
1581 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1582 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1583 as explained at the top of this document.
1584
1585 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001586 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001587 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001588 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1589 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1590 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1591 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1592
1593 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1594 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1595 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1596 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1597 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1598 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1599
1600 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1601 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1602 instead.
1603
1604 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1605 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1606
1607
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001608cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001609 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001610 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1611 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1612 yes | no | yes | yes
1613 Arguments :
1614 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1615 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1616 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1617 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1618 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1619 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1620 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1621 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1622 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1623
1624 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1625 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1626 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1627 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1628 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1629 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1630 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1631 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1632 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1633 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1634 "insert" and "prefix".
1635
1636 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1637 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1638 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1639 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1640 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1641 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1642 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1643 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1644 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1645
1646 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1647 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1648 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1649 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1650 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1651 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1652 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1653 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1654 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1655 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1656 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1657
1658 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1659 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1660 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1661 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1662 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1663 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1664 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1665 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1666 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1667 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1668
1669 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1670 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1671 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1672 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1673 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1674 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1675 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1676 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1677 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1678
1679 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1680 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1681 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1682 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1683 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1684 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1685 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1686 persistence cookie in the cache.
1687 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1688
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001689 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001690 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001691 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1692 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1693 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1694 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1695 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1696 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001697
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001698 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1699 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1700 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1701 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001702
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001703 Examples :
1704 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1705 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1706 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1707
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001708 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001709 and "ignore-persist".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001710
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001711
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001712default-server [param*]
1713 Change default options for a server in a backend
1714 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1715 yes | no | yes | yes
1716 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001717 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1718 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1719 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1720 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001721
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001722 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001723 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1724
1725 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001726
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001727
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001728default_backend <backend>
1729 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1730 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1731 yes | yes | yes | no
1732 Arguments :
1733 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1734
1735 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1736 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1737 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1738 will catch all undetermined requests.
1739
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001740 Example :
1741
1742 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1743 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1744 default_backend dynamic
1745
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001746 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1747
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001748
1749disabled
1750 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1751 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1752 yes | yes | yes | yes
1753 Arguments : none
1754
1755 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1756 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1757 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1758 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1759 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1760 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1761 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1762
1763 See also : "enabled"
1764
1765
Willy Tarreau5ce94572010-06-07 14:35:41 +02001766dispatch <address>:<port>
1767 Set a default server address
1768 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1769 no | no | yes | yes
1770 Arguments : none
1771
1772 <address> is the IPv4 address of the default server. Alternatively, a
1773 resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
1774 during start-up.
1775
1776 <ports> is a mandatory port specification. All connections will be sent
1777 to this port, and it is not permitted to use port offsets as is
1778 possible with normal servers.
1779
1780 The "disabled" keyword designates a default server for use when no other
1781 server can take the connection. In the past it was used to forward non
1782 persistent connections to an auxiliary load balancer. Due to its simple
1783 syntax, it has also been used for simple TCP relays. It is recommended not to
1784 use it for more clarity, and to use the "server" directive instead.
1785
1786 See also : "server"
1787
1788
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001789enabled
1790 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1791 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1792 yes | yes | yes | yes
1793 Arguments : none
1794
1795 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1796 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1797
1798 See also : "disabled"
1799
1800
1801errorfile <code> <file>
1802 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1803 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1804 yes | yes | yes | yes
1805 Arguments :
1806 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1807 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1808
1809 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001810 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001811 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001812 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1813 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001814
1815 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1816 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1817 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1818
1819 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1820 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1821 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1822 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1823
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001824 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1825 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1826 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1827 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1828 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1829 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1830
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001831 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1832 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1833 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001834 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001835 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1836
1837 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1838
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001839 Example :
1840 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1841 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1842 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1843
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001844
1845errorloc <code> <url>
1846errorloc302 <code> <url>
1847 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1848 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1849 yes | yes | yes | yes
1850 Arguments :
1851 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1852 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1853
1854 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1855 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1856 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1857 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1858 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1859
1860 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1861 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1862 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1863
1864 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1865 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1866 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1867 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1868 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1869 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1870 request.
1871
1872 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1873
1874
1875errorloc303 <code> <url>
1876 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1877 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1878 yes | yes | yes | yes
1879 Arguments :
1880 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1881 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1882
1883 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1884 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1885 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1886 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1887 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1888
1889 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1890 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1891 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1892
1893 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1894 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1895 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1896 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001897 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001898
1899 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1900
1901
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001902force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1903 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1904 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1905 no | yes | yes | yes
1906
1907 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1908 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1909 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1910 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1911 marked down for maintenance operations.
1912
1913 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1914 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1915 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1916 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1917 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1918 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1919 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1920 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1921 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1922
1923 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1924 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1925 is used.
1926
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001927 See also : "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist",
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001928 and section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001929
1930
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001931fullconn <conns>
1932 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1933 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1934 yes | no | yes | yes
1935 Arguments :
1936 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1937 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1938
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001939 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001940 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001941 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001942 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1943 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1944 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1945 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1946 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001947 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001948
1949 Example :
1950 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1951 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1952 # connections.
1953 backend dynamic
1954 fullconn 10000
1955 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1956 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1957
1958 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1959
1960
1961grace <time>
1962 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1963 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001964 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001965 Arguments :
1966 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1967 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1968 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1969
1970 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1971 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001972 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001973 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1974
1975 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1976 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1977 simplify it.
1978
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001979
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001980hash-type <method>
1981 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1982 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1983 yes | no | yes | yes
1984 Arguments :
1985 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1986 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1987 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1988 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1989 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1990 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1991 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1992 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1993 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1994
1995 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1996 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1997 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1998 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1999 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
2000 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
2001 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
2002 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
2003 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
2004 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
2005 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
2006 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
2007 important that all servers have the same IDs.
2008
2009 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
2010
2011 See also : "balance", "server"
2012
2013
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002014http-check disable-on-404
2015 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
2016 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002017 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002018 Arguments : none
2019
2020 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
2021 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
2022 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
2023 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
2024 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
2025 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
2026 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
2027 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
2028 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
2029
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002030 See also : "option httpchk"
2031
2032
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002033http-check send-state
2034 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2035 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2036 yes | no | yes | yes
2037 Arguments : none
2038
2039 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2040 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2041 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2042 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2043 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2044
2045 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2046 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2047 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2048 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2049 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2050 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2051 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2052 checked in multiple backends.
2053
2054 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2055 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2056
2057 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2058 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2059 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2060 one fails.
2061
2062 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2063 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2064 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2065
2066 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2067 server's queue.
2068
2069 Example of a header received by the application server :
2070 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2071 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2072
2073 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2074
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002075http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2076 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002077 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2078
2079 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2080 no | yes | yes | yes
2081
2082 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2083 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2084 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2085 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2086 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2087 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2088
2089 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2090 instance.
2091
2092 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002093 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2094 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2095 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002096
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002097 http-request allow if nagios
2098 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2099 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2100 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002101
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002102 Example:
2103 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002104
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002105 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002106
2107 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002108
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002109id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002110 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2111 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2112 no | yes | yes | yes
2113 Arguments : none
2114
2115 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2116 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2117 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002118
2119
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02002120ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2121 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2122 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2123 no | yes | yes | yes
2124
2125 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2126 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2127 and running).
2128
2129 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2130 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2131 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2132 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2133 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2134
2135 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2136 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2137
2138 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
2139 "unless" condition is met.
2140
2141 See also : "force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
2142
2143
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002144log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002145log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002146 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2147 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2148 yes | yes | yes | yes
2149 Arguments :
2150 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2151 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2152 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2153 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2154 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2155 parameter.
2156
2157 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2158 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2159
2160 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2161 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2162 standard syslog port).
2163
2164 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2165 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2166 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2167 appropriately writeable).
2168
2169 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2170
2171 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2172 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2173 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2174
2175 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2176 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2177 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002178 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2179 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2180 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2181 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2182 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002183
2184 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2185
2186 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2187 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2188 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2189
2190 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002191 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2192 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2193 "info".
2194
2195 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2196 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2197 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2198 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2199
2200 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2201 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002202
2203 Example :
2204 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002205 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2206 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002207
2208
2209maxconn <conns>
2210 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2211 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2212 yes | yes | yes | no
2213 Arguments :
2214 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2215 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2216 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2217 closes.
2218
2219 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2220 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2221 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2222 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2223 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2224 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2225 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2226 properly tuned.
2227
2228 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2229 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2230 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2231
2232 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2233
2234
2235mode { tcp|http|health }
2236 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2237 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2238 yes | yes | yes | yes
2239 Arguments :
2240 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2241 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2242 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2243 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2244
2245 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2246 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2247 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2248 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2249 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2250
2251 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2252 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2253 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2254 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2255 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2256 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2257
2258 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2259 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2260 will be refused.
2261
2262 Example :
2263 defaults http_instances
2264 mode http
2265
2266 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2267
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002268
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002269monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002270 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002271 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2272 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002273 Arguments :
2274 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2275 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002276 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002277 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2278 backend and its backup.
2279
2280 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2281 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2282 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2283 servers in a list of backends.
2284
2285 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2286 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2287 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2288 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2289 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2290 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2291 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002292 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002293
2294 Example:
2295 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002296 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002297 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2298 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2299 monitor-uri /site_alive
2300 monitor fail if site_dead
2301
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002302 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2303
2304
2305monitor-net <source>
2306 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2307 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2308 yes | yes | yes | no
2309 Arguments :
2310 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2311 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2312 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2313 followed by a mask.
2314
2315 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2316 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002317 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002318 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2319
2320 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2321 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2322 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2323 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2324 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2325
2326 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2327 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2328 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2329 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2330 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2331
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002332 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2333 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2334
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002335 Example :
2336 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2337 frontend www
2338 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2339
2340 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2341
2342
2343monitor-uri <uri>
2344 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2345 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2346 yes | yes | yes | no
2347 Arguments :
2348 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2349 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2350
2351 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2352 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2353 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2354 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2355 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2356 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2357 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2358 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2359
2360 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2361 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2362 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2363 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2364 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2365 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2366
2367 Example :
2368 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2369 frontend www
2370 mode http
2371 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2372
2373 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2374
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002375
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002376option abortonclose
2377no option abortonclose
2378 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2379 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2380 yes | no | yes | yes
2381 Arguments : none
2382
2383 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2384 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2385 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2386 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002387 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002388 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2389 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2390 encountered while delivering the response.
2391
2392 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2393 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2394 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2395 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2396 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2397 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002398 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002399 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002400 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002401 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2402 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2403 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2404
2405 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2406 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2407 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2408 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2409 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2410 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2411 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2412 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002413 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002414
2415 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2416 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2417
2418 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2419
2420
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002421option accept-invalid-http-request
2422no option accept-invalid-http-request
2423 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2424 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2425 yes | yes | yes | no
2426 Arguments : none
2427
2428 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2429 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2430 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2431 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2432 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2433 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2434 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2435 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2436 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2437
2438 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2439 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2440 been confirmed.
2441
2442 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2443 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2444 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2445 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2446
2447 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2448 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2449
2450 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2451 stats socket.
2452
2453
2454option accept-invalid-http-response
2455no option accept-invalid-http-response
2456 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2457 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2458 yes | no | yes | yes
2459 Arguments : none
2460
2461 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2462 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2463 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2464 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2465 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2466 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2467 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2468 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2469 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2470
2471 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2472 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2473 been confirmed.
2474
2475 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2476 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2477 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2478 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2479
2480 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2481 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2482
2483 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2484 stats socket.
2485
2486
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002487option allbackups
2488no option allbackups
2489 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2490 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2491 yes | no | yes | yes
2492 Arguments : none
2493
2494 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2495 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2496 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2497 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2498 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2499 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2500 order between the backup servers anymore.
2501
2502 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2503 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2504
2505 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2506 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2507
2508
2509option checkcache
2510no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002511 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002512 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2513 yes | no | yes | yes
2514 Arguments : none
2515
2516 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2517 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002518 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002519 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2520 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2521 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2522
2523 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002524 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002525 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002526 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2527 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002528 to the client are :
2529 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002530 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002531 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002532 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2533 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2534 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2535 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2536 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2537 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2538 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2539 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2540 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2541 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2542 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2543
2544 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002545 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002546 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002547 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002548 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2549
2550 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2551 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002552 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002553 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2554
2555 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2556 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2557
2558
2559option clitcpka
2560no option clitcpka
2561 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2562 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2563 yes | yes | yes | no
2564 Arguments : none
2565
2566 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2567 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2568 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2569 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2570
2571 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2572 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2573 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2574 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2575
2576 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2577 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2578 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2579 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2580 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2581
2582 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2583
2584 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2585 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2586 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2587
2588 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2589 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2590
2591 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2592
2593
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002594option contstats
2595 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2596 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2597 yes | yes | yes | no
2598 Arguments : none
2599
2600 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2601 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2602 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2603 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2604 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2605 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2606 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2607
2608
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002609option dontlog-normal
2610no option dontlog-normal
2611 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2612 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2613 yes | yes | yes | no
2614 Arguments : none
2615
2616 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2617 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2618 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2619 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2620 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2621 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2622 logged.
2623
2624 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2625 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2626 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2627
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002628 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002629 logging.
2630
2631
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002632option dontlognull
2633no option dontlognull
2634 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2635 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2636 yes | yes | yes | no
2637 Arguments : none
2638
2639 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2640 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2641 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2642 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2643 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2644 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2645 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2646
2647 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2648 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2649 would not be logged.
2650
2651 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2652 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2653
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002654 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002655
2656
2657option forceclose
2658no option forceclose
2659 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2660 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002661 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002662 Arguments : none
2663
2664 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2665 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2666 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2667 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2668 global session times in the logs.
2669
2670 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002671 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002672 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2673 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2674 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2675 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002676
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002677 This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
2678 will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
2679 the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
2680
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002681 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2682 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2683
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002684 See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002685
2686
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002687option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002688 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2689 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2690 yes | yes | yes | yes
2691 Arguments :
2692 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2693 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002694 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002695 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002696
2697 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2698 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2699 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2700 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2701 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2702 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2703 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002704 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2705 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2706 possible that the client has already brought one.
2707
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002708 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002709 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002710 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2711 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002712 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2713 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002714
2715 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2716 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2717 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2718 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2719 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2720 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2721 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2722
2723 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002724 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2725 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2726 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002727
2728 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2729 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2730 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2731 when using this option.
2732
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002733 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002734 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2735 frontend www
2736 mode http
2737 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2738
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002739 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2740 backend www
2741 mode http
2742 option forwardfor header X-Client
2743
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002744 See also : "option httpclose"
2745
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002746
2747option http-pretend-keepalive
2748no option http-pretend-keepalive
2749 Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
2750 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2751 yes | yes | yes | yes
2752 Arguments : none
2753
2754 When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
2755 adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
2756 Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
2757 from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
2758 is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
2759 maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
2760 a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
2761 consider the response complete.
2762
2763 By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
2764 believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
2765 to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
2766 will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
2767 "forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
2768 connection is correctly closed on the server side.
2769
2770 It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
2771 will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
2772 and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
2773 network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
2774 worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
2775 less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
2776 enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
2777
2778 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2779 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2780 This option has no effect if it is combined with "option httpclose", which
2781 has precedence.
2782
2783 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2784 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2785
2786 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
2787
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002788
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002789option http-server-close
2790no option http-server-close
2791 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2792 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2793 yes | yes | yes | yes
2794 Arguments : none
2795
2796 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2797 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2798 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2799 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2800 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2801 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002802 of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those
2803 requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the request. The effect
2804 will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround consists in enabling
2805 "option http-pretend-keepalive".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002806
2807 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2808 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2809 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2810 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002811 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2812 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002813
2814 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2815 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002816 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2817 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2818 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002819
2820 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2821 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2822
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002823 See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and
2824 "option httpclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002825
2826
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002827option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002828no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002829 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2830 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2831 yes | yes | yes | no
2832 Arguments : none
2833
2834 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2835 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2836 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2837 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2838 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2839 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2840 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2841
2842 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2843 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2844 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2845 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2846 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2847 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2848 request along its whole life.
2849
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002850 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2851 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2852 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2853 front of an existing proxy.
2854
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002855 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2856
2857 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2858 http-server-close".
2859
2860
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002861option httpchk
2862option httpchk <uri>
2863option httpchk <method> <uri>
2864option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2865 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2866 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2867 yes | no | yes | yes
2868 Arguments :
2869 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2870 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2871 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2872 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2873 ones.
2874
2875 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2876 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2877 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2878
2879 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2880 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2881 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2882 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2883 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2884
2885 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2886 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2887 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2888 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2889 the lack of any response.
2890
2891 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2892
2893 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2894 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2895 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2896
2897 Examples :
2898 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2899 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2900 backend https_relay
2901 mode tcp
2902 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2903 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2904
2905 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2906 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2907
2908
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002909option httpclose
2910no option httpclose
2911 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2912 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2913 yes | yes | yes | yes
2914 Arguments : none
2915
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02002916 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yet support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002917 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2918 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2919 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2920 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2921 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2922 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2923 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2924 be removed.
2925
2926 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002927 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2928 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2929 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2930 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2931 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2932 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002933
2934 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2935 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2936 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002937 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2938 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002939
2940 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2941 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2942
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002943 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002944
2945
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002946option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002947 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2948 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2949 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002950 Arguments :
2951 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2952 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2953 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2954 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2955 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002956
2957 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2958 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2959 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2960 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2961 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2962 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2963 ports.
2964
2965 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2966
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002967 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2968 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2969 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2970 by default.
2971
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002972 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002973
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002974
2975option http_proxy
2976no option http_proxy
2977 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2978 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2979 yes | yes | yes | yes
2980 Arguments : none
2981
2982 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2983 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2984 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2985 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2986 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2987
2988 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2989 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2990 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2991 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2992 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2993 be analyzed.
2994
2995 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2996 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2997
2998 Example :
2999 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
3000 backend direct_forward
3001 option httpclose
3002 option http_proxy
3003
3004 See also : "option httpclose"
3005
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003006
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02003007option ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
3008 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
3009 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3010 no | yes | yes | yes
3011
3012 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
3013 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
3014 and running).
3015
3016 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
3017 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
3018 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
3019 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
3020 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
3021
3022 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
3023 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
3024
3025 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
3026 "unless" condition is met.
3027
3028 See also : "option force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
3029
3030
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02003031option independant-streams
3032no option independant-streams
3033 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
3034 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3035 yes | yes | yes | yes
3036 Arguments : none
3037
3038 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
3039 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
3040 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
3041 receive data or not.
3042
3043 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
3044 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
3045 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
3046 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
3047 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
3048 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
3049 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
3050 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
3051 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
3052 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
3053 socket buffers.
3054
3055 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
3056 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
3057 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
3058 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
3059 slow lines, so use it with caution.
3060
3061 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
3062
3063
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003064option log-health-checks
3065no option log-health-checks
3066 Enable or disable logging of health checks
3067 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3068 yes | no | yes | yes
3069 Arguments : none
3070
3071 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
3072 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
3073 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
3074 of additional information is limited.
3075
3076 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
3077 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
3078
3079 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
3080
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003081
3082option log-separate-errors
3083no option log-separate-errors
3084 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
3085 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3086 yes | yes | yes | no
3087 Arguments : none
3088
3089 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
3090 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
3091 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
3092 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
3093 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
3094 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
3095 provides very important information.
3096
3097 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
3098 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
3099 error logs.
3100
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003101 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003102 logging.
3103
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003104
3105option logasap
3106no option logasap
3107 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
3108 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3109 yes | yes | yes | no
3110 Arguments : none
3111
3112 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
3113 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
3114 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
3115 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
3116 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
3117 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
3118 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003119 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003120 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
3121 bytes are expected to be transferred.
3122
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01003123 Examples :
3124 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
3125 mode http
3126 option httplog
3127 option logasap
3128 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3129
3130 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3131 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3132 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3133 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3134
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003135 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003136 logging.
3137
3138
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003139option mysql-check
3140 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3141 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3142 yes | no | yes | yes
3143 Arguments : none
3144
3145 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3146 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3147 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3148 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3149 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3150
3151 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3152 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3153 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3154 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3155 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3156 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3157
3158 See also: "option httpchk"
3159
3160
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003161option nolinger
3162no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003163 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003164 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3165 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003166 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003167
3168 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3169 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3170 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3171 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3172 connections.
3173
3174 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3175 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3176 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3177 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3178 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3179 this too.
3180
3181 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3182 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3183 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3184
3185 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3186 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3187 for servers.
3188
3189 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3190 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3191
3192
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003193option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3194 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3195 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3196 yes | yes | yes | yes
3197 Arguments :
3198 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3199 matching <network>
3200 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3201 header name.
3202
3203 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3204 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3205 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3206 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3207 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3208 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3209 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3210 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3211 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3212 possible that the client has already brought one.
3213
3214 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3215 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3216 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3217 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3218 header and requires different one.
3219
3220 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3221 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3222 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3223 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3224 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3225 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3226 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3227
3228 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3229 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3230 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3231 both are defined.
3232
3233 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3234 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3235 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3236 when using this option.
3237
3238 Examples :
3239 # Original Destination address
3240 frontend www
3241 mode http
3242 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3243
3244 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3245 backend www
3246 mode http
3247 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3248
3249 See also : "option httpclose"
3250
3251
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003252option persist
3253no option persist
3254 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3255 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3256 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003257 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003258
3259 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3260 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3261 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3262 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3263 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3264 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3265 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3266 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3267 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3268 redirected to another valid server.
3269
3270 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3271 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3272
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003273 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003274
3275
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003276option redispatch
3277no option redispatch
3278 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3279 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3280 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003281 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003282
3283 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3284 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3285 be able to access the service anymore.
3286
3287 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3288 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3289
3290 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3291 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3292 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003293
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003294 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3295 "redisp" keywords.
3296
3297 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3298 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3299
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003300 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003301
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003302
3303option smtpchk
3304option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3305 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3306 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3307 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003308 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003309 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3310 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3311 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3312
3313 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3314 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3315 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3316
3317 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3318 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3319 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3320 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3321 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3322 dead server.
3323
3324 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3325 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3326 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3327 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3328
3329 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3330 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3331 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3332 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3333 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3334
3335 Example :
3336 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3337
3338 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3339
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003340
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003341option socket-stats
3342no option socket-stats
3343
3344 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3345 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3346 yes | yes | yes | no
3347
3348 Arguments : none
3349
3350
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003351option splice-auto
3352no option splice-auto
3353 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3354 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3355 yes | yes | yes | yes
3356 Arguments : none
3357
3358 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3359 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3360 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3361 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003362 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003363 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3364 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3365 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3366 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3367
3368 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3369 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3370 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3371 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3372 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3373 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3374 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3375 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3376 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3377 keyword.
3378
3379 Example :
3380 option splice-auto
3381
3382 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3383 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3384
3385 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3386 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3387
3388
3389option splice-request
3390no option splice-request
3391 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3392 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3393 yes | yes | yes | yes
3394 Arguments : none
3395
3396 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3397 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3398 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3399 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3400 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3401 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3402
3403 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3404
3405 Example :
3406 option splice-request
3407
3408 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3409 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3410
3411 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3412 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3413
3414
3415option splice-response
3416no option splice-response
3417 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3418 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3419 yes | yes | yes | yes
3420 Arguments : none
3421
3422 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3423 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3424 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3425 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3426 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3427 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3428
3429 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3430
3431 Example :
3432 option splice-response
3433
3434 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3435 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3436
3437 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3438 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3439
3440
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003441option srvtcpka
3442no option srvtcpka
3443 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3444 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3445 yes | no | yes | yes
3446 Arguments : none
3447
3448 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3449 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3450 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3451 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3452
3453 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3454 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3455 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3456 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3457
3458 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3459 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3460 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3461 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3462 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3463
3464 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3465
3466 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3467 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3468 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3469
3470 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3471 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3472
3473 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3474
3475
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003476option ssl-hello-chk
3477 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3478 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3479 yes | no | yes | yes
3480 Arguments : none
3481
3482 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3483 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3484 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3485 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3486 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3487 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3488 hello message.
3489
3490 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3491 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3492 messages, which is appreciable.
3493
3494 See also: "option httpchk"
3495
3496
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003497option tcp-smart-accept
3498no option tcp-smart-accept
3499 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3500 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3501 yes | yes | yes | no
3502 Arguments : none
3503
3504 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3505 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3506 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3507 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3508 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3509 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3510
3511 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3512 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3513 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3514 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3515
3516 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3517 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3518 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3519 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3520
3521 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3522 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3523 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3524
3525 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3526 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3527 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3528
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003529 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3530
3531
3532option tcp-smart-connect
3533no option tcp-smart-connect
3534 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3535 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3536 yes | no | yes | yes
3537 Arguments : none
3538
3539 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3540 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3541 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3542 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3543 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3544
3545 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3546 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3547 complex.
3548
3549 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3550 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3551 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3552
3553 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3554 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3555
3556 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3557
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003558
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003559option tcpka
3560 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3561 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3562 yes | yes | yes | yes
3563 Arguments : none
3564
3565 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3566 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3567 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3568 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3569
3570 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3571 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3572 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3573 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3574
3575 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3576 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3577 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3578 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3579 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3580
3581 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3582
3583 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3584 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3585 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3586 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3587 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3588 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3589 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3590 backends.
3591
3592 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3593
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003594
3595option tcplog
3596 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3597 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3598 yes | yes | yes | yes
3599 Arguments : none
3600
3601 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3602 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3603 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3604 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3605 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3606 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3607 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3608 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3609
3610 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3611
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003612 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003613
3614
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003615option transparent
3616no option transparent
3617 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3618 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003619 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003620 Arguments : none
3621
3622 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3623 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3624 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3625 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3626 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3627 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3628 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3629 appropriate server.
3630
3631 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3632 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3633
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003634 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3635 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003636
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003637
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003638persist rdp-cookie
3639persist rdp-cookie(name)
3640 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3641 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3642 yes | no | yes | yes
3643 Arguments :
3644 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003645 default cookie name "msts" will be used. There currently is no
3646 valid reason to change this name.
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003647
3648 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3649 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3650 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3651 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3652 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3653 forwarded to this server.
3654
3655 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3656 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3657 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003658 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003659 a single "listen" section.
3660
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003661 Also, it is important to understand that the terminal server will emit this
3662 RDP cookie only if it is configured for "token redirection mode", which means
3663 that the "IP address redirection" option is disabled.
3664
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003665 Example :
3666 listen tse-farm
3667 bind :3389
3668 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3669 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3670 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3671 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3672 persist rdp-cookie
3673 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3674 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3675 balance rdp-cookie
3676 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3677 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3678
3679 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3680
3681
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003682rate-limit sessions <rate>
3683 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3684 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3685 yes | yes | yes | no
3686 Arguments :
3687 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3688 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3689
3690 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3691 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3692 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3693 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3694 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3695 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3696
3697 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3698 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3699 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3700 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3701
3702 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3703 listen smtp
3704 mode tcp
3705 bind :25
3706 rate-limit sessions 10
3707 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3708
3709 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3710 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3711
3712 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3713
3714
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003715redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3716redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003717 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3718 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3719 no | yes | yes | yes
3720
3721 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003722 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003723
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003724 Arguments :
3725 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3726 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3727 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3728 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003729 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3730 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3731 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3732 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003733
3734 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3735 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3736 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3737 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3738 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3739 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3740 location with a GET method.
3741
3742 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3743 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3744
3745 - "drop-query"
3746 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3747 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3748 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3749 with a location-type redirect.
3750
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003751 - "append-slash"
3752 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3753 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3754 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3755 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3756
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003757 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3758 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3759 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3760 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3761 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3762 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3763 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3764
3765 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3766 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3767 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3768 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3769 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3770 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3771 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003772
3773 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3774 acl clear dst_port 80
3775 acl secure dst_port 8080
3776 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003777 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003778 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003779 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3780
3781 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003782 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3783 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3784 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003785 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003786
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003787 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3788 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3789 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3790
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003791 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003792
3793
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003794redisp (deprecated)
3795redispatch (deprecated)
3796 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3797 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3798 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003799 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003800
3801 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3802 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3803 be able to access the service anymore.
3804
3805 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3806 redistribute them to a working server.
3807
3808 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3809 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3810 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003811
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003812 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3813 "option redispatch" instead.
3814
3815 See also : "option redispatch"
3816
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003817
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003818reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003819 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3820 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3821 no | yes | yes | yes
3822 Arguments :
3823 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3824 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003825 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003826
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003827 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3828 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3829
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003830 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3831 the last header of an HTTP request.
3832
3833 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3834 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3835 responses.
3836
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003837 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3838 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3839 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3840
3841 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3842 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003843
3844
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003845reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3846reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003847 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3848 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3849 no | yes | yes | yes
3850 Arguments :
3851 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3852 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3853 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3854 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3855 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3856 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3857 ignores case.
3858
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003859 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3860 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3861
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003862 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3863 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3864 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3865 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003866 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003867
3868 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3869 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3870
3871 Example :
3872 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3873 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3874 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3875
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003876 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3877 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003878
3879
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003880reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3881reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003882 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3883 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3884 no | yes | yes | yes
3885 Arguments :
3886 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3887 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3888 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3889 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3890 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3891 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3892
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003893 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3894 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3895
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003896 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3897 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3898 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3899 next servers.
3900
3901 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3902 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3903 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3904
3905 Example :
3906 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3907 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3908 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3909
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003910 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3911 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003912
3913
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003914reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3915reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003916 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3917 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3918 no | yes | yes | yes
3919 Arguments :
3920 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3921 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3922 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3923 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3924 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3925 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3926 case.
3927
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003928 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3929 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3930
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003931 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3932 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3933 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3934 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003935 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003936
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003937 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003938 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003939 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003940
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003941 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3942 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3943
3944 Example :
3945 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3946 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3947 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3948
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003949 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3950 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003951
3952
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003953reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3954reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003955 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3956 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3957 no | yes | yes | yes
3958 Arguments :
3959 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3960 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3961 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3962 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3963 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3964 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3965 case.
3966
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003967 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3968 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3969
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003970 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3971 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3972 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3973 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3974
3975 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3976 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3977
3978 Example :
3979 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3980 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3981 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3982 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3983
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003984 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3985 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003986
3987
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003988reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3989reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003990 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3991 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3992 no | yes | yes | yes
3993 Arguments :
3994 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3995 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3996 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3997 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3998 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3999 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
4000
4001 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4002 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4003 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4004 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004005 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004006
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004007 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4008 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4009
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004010 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
4011 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
4012 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
4013
4014 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4015 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4016 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4017 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
4018 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
4019
4020 Example :
4021 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
4022 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
4023 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
4024 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
4025
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004026 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
4027 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004028
4029
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004030reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4031reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004032 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
4033 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4034 no | yes | yes | yes
4035 Arguments :
4036 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4037 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
4038 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
4039 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
4040 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
4041 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
4042 ignores case.
4043
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004044 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4045 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4046
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004047 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4048 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004049 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
4050 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
4051 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004052 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
4053 not set.
4054
4055 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
4056 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
4057 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
4058 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
4059 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
4060
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004061 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004062 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
4063 # block all others.
4064 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
4065 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
4066
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004067 # block bad guys
4068 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
4069 reqitarpit . if badguys
4070
4071 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
4072 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004073
4074
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02004075retries <value>
4076 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
4077 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4078 yes | no | yes | yes
4079 Arguments :
4080 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
4081 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
4082 default value is 3.
4083
4084 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
4085 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
4086 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
4087
4088 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
4089 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
4090
4091 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
4092 server even if a cookie references a different server.
4093
4094 See also : "option redispatch"
4095
4096
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004097rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004098 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
4099 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4100 no | yes | yes | yes
4101 Arguments :
4102 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4103 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004104 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004105
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004106 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4107 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4108
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004109 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
4110 the last header of an HTTP response.
4111
4112 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4113 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4114 responses.
4115
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004116 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
4117 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004118
4119
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004120rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4121rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004122 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
4123 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4124 no | yes | yes | yes
4125 Arguments :
4126 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4127 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4128 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4129 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4130 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4131 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
4132 ignores case.
4133
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004134 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4135 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4136
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004137 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4138 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4139 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4140 client.
4141
4142 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4143 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4144 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4145
4146 Example :
4147 # remove the Server header from responses
4148 reqidel ^Server:.*
4149
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004150 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4151 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004152
4153
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004154rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4155rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004156 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4157 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4158 no | yes | yes | yes
4159 Arguments :
4160 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4161 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4162 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4163 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4164 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4165 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4166 ignores case.
4167
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004168 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4169 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4170
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004171 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4172 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4173 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4174 case-sensitive.
4175
4176 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004177 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4178 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4179 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004180
4181 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4182 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4183
4184 Example :
4185 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4186 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4187
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004188 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4189 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004190
4191
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004192rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4193rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004194 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4195 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4196 no | yes | yes | yes
4197 Arguments :
4198 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4199 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4200 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4201 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4202 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4203 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4204 ignores case.
4205
4206 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4207 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4208 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4209 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004210 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004211
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004212 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4213 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4214
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004215 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4216 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4217 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4218
4219 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4220 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4221 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4222 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4223 are not case-sensitive.
4224
4225 Example :
4226 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4227 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4228
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004229 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4230 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004231
4232
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004233server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4234 Declare a server in a backend
4235 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4236 no | no | yes | yes
4237 Arguments :
4238 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4239 appear in logs and alerts.
4240
4241 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4242 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4243 start-up.
4244
4245 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4246 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4247 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4248 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4249 adding this value to the client's port.
4250
4251 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4252 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004253 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004254
4255 Examples :
4256 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4257 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4258
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004259 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004260
4261
4262source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004263source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004264source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004265 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4266 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4267 yes | no | yes | yes
4268 Arguments :
4269 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4270 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4271 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4272 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4273
4274 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4275 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004276 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4277 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4278 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004279
4280 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4281 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4282 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4283 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4284 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4285 <addr>.
4286
4287 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4288 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4289 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4290 port.
4291
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004292 <hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
4293 This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
4294 contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
4295 used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
4296 and to automatically bind to the the client's IP address as seen
4297 by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
4298 occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
4299 below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
4300 is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
4301 keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
4302 HTTP header.
4303
4304 <occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
4305 header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
4306 in order to specificy which occurrence to use for the source IP
4307 address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
4308 occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
4309 positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
4310 is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
4311 at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
4312 proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
4313 assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
4314
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004315 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4316 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4317 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4318 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4319 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4320 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4321
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004322 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4323 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4324 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4325 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4326
4327 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4328 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4329 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4330 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4331 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4332 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4333
4334 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4335 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4336 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4337 there are two methods :
4338
4339 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4340 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4341 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4342 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4343 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4344 of the client ranges may be used.
4345
4346 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4347 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4348 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4349 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4350 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4351 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4352 same session.
4353
4354 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4355 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4356 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4357 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4358 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4359 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4360
4361 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4362 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4363 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004364 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004365
4366 Examples :
4367 backend private
4368 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4369 source 192.168.1.200
4370
4371 backend transparent_ssl1
4372 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4373 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4374
4375 backend transparent_ssl2
4376 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4377 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4378 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4379
4380 backend transparent_ssl3
4381 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4382 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4383 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4384
4385 backend transparent_smtp
4386 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4387 # with Tproxy version 4.
4388 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4389
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004390 backend transparent_http
4391 # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
4392 # proxy.
4393 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
4394
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004395 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004396 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4397
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004398
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004399srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4400 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4401 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4402 yes | no | yes | yes
4403 Arguments :
4404 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4405 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4406 as explained at the top of this document.
4407
4408 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4409 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4410 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4411 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4412 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4413 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4414 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4415
4416 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4417 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4418 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4419 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4420 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004421 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004422 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004423 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004424
4425 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4426 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4427 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4428 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4429 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4430 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4431
4432 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4433 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4434
4435 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4436
4437
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004438stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4439 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4440 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4441 yes | no | yes | yes
4442 Arguments :
4443 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4444
4445 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4446
4447 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4448 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4449 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4450 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4451 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4452 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4453
4454 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4455 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4456 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4457 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4458
4459 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4460 report using "stats scope".
4461
4462 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4463 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4464 unobvious parameters.
4465
4466 Example :
4467 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4468 backend public_www
4469 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4470 stats enable
4471 stats hide-version
4472 stats scope .
4473 stats uri /admin?stats
4474 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4475 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4476 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4477
4478 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4479 backend private_monitoring
4480 stats enable
4481 stats uri /admin?stats
4482 stats refresh 5s
4483
4484 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4485
4486
4487stats enable
4488 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4489 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4490 yes | no | yes | yes
4491 Arguments : none
4492
4493 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4494 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4495 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4496 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4497 - stats auth : no authentication
4498 - stats scope : no restriction
4499
4500 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4501 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4502 unobvious parameters.
4503
4504 Example :
4505 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4506 backend public_www
4507 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4508 stats enable
4509 stats hide-version
4510 stats scope .
4511 stats uri /admin?stats
4512 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4513 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4514 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4515
4516 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4517 backend private_monitoring
4518 stats enable
4519 stats uri /admin?stats
4520 stats refresh 5s
4521
4522 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4523
4524
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004525stats hide-version
4526 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004527 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4528 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004529 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004530
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004531 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4532 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4533 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4534 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4535 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4536 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004537
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004538 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4539 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4540 unobvious parameters.
4541
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004542 Example :
4543 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4544 backend public_www
4545 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004546 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004547 stats hide-version
4548 stats scope .
4549 stats uri /admin?stats
4550 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4551 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4552 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004553
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004554 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4555 backend private_monitoring
4556 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004557 stats uri /admin?stats
4558 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004559
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004560 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004561
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004562
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004563stats realm <realm>
4564 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4565 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4566 yes | no | yes | yes
4567 Arguments :
4568 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4569 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4570 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4571
4572 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4573 using a backslash ('\').
4574
4575 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4576 only related to authentication.
4577
4578 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4579 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4580 unobvious parameters.
4581
4582 Example :
4583 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4584 backend public_www
4585 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4586 stats enable
4587 stats hide-version
4588 stats scope .
4589 stats uri /admin?stats
4590 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4591 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4592 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4593
4594 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4595 backend private_monitoring
4596 stats enable
4597 stats uri /admin?stats
4598 stats refresh 5s
4599
4600 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4601
4602
4603stats refresh <delay>
4604 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4605 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4606 yes | no | yes | yes
4607 Arguments :
4608 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4609 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4610 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4611 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4612 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4613 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4614
4615 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4616 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4617 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4618 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4619
4620 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4621 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4622 unobvious parameters.
4623
4624 Example :
4625 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4626 backend public_www
4627 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4628 stats enable
4629 stats hide-version
4630 stats scope .
4631 stats uri /admin?stats
4632 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4633 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4634 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4635
4636 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4637 backend private_monitoring
4638 stats enable
4639 stats uri /admin?stats
4640 stats refresh 5s
4641
4642 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4643
4644
4645stats scope { <name> | "." }
4646 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4647 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4648 yes | no | yes | yes
4649 Arguments :
4650 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4651 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4652 section in which the statement appears.
4653
4654 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4655 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4656 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4657 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4658 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4659 exists.
4660
4661 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4662 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4663 unobvious parameters.
4664
4665 Example :
4666 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4667 backend public_www
4668 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4669 stats enable
4670 stats hide-version
4671 stats scope .
4672 stats uri /admin?stats
4673 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4674 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4675 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4676
4677 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4678 backend private_monitoring
4679 stats enable
4680 stats uri /admin?stats
4681 stats refresh 5s
4682
4683 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4684
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004685
4686stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4687 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4688 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4689 yes | no | yes | yes
4690
4691 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4692 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4693
4694 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4695 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4696
4697 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4698 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4699 unobvious parameters.
4700
4701 Example :
4702 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4703 backend private_monitoring
4704 stats enable
4705 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4706 stats uri /admin?stats
4707 stats refresh 5s
4708
4709 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4710 global section.
4711
4712
4713stats show-legends
4714 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4715 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4716 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4717 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4718 - IP (socket, server)
4719 - cookie (backend, server)
4720
4721 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4722 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4723 unobvious parameters.
4724
4725 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4726
4727
4728stats show-node [ <name> ]
4729 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4730 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4731 yes | no | yes | yes
4732 Arguments:
4733 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4734 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4735
4736 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4737 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4738 provided for each customer.
4739
4740 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4741 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4742 unobvious parameters.
4743
4744 Example:
4745 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4746 backend private_monitoring
4747 stats enable
4748 stats show-node Europe-1
4749 stats uri /admin?stats
4750 stats refresh 5s
4751
4752 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4753 section.
4754
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004755
4756stats uri <prefix>
4757 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4758 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4759 yes | no | yes | yes
4760 Arguments :
4761 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4762 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4763 query string.
4764
4765 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4766 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4767 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4768 possible to reach it in the application.
4769
4770 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004771 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004772 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4773 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4774 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4775 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4776
4777 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4778 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4779 an address or a port to statistics only.
4780
4781 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4782 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4783 unobvious parameters.
4784
4785 Example :
4786 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4787 backend public_www
4788 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4789 stats enable
4790 stats hide-version
4791 stats scope .
4792 stats uri /admin?stats
4793 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4794 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4795 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4796
4797 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4798 backend private_monitoring
4799 stats enable
4800 stats uri /admin?stats
4801 stats refresh 5s
4802
4803 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4804
4805
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004806stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4807 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004808 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004809 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004810
4811 Arguments :
4812 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4813 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4814 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4815 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4816
4817 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4818 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4819 the "stick-table" statement.
4820
4821 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4822 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4823 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4824 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4825 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4826
4827 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4828 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4829 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4830 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4831 transformation rules.
4832
4833 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4834 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4835 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4836 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4837 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4838 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4839 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4840
4841 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4842 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4843 ACL based conditions.
4844
4845 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4846 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4847 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4848 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4849
4850 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4851 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4852 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4853 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4854
4855 Example :
4856 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4857 # last 30 minutes
4858 backend pop
4859 mode tcp
4860 balance roundrobin
4861 stick store-request src
4862 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4863 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4864 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4865
4866 backend smtp
4867 mode tcp
4868 balance roundrobin
4869 stick match src table pop
4870 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4871 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4872
4873 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4874 extraction.
4875
4876
4877stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4878 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4879 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4880 no | no | yes | yes
4881
4882 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4883 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4884 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4885 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4886
4887 Examples :
4888 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004889 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004890
4891 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4892 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4893 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4894
4895
4896 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4897 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4898 backend http
4899 mode http
4900 balance roundrobin
4901 stick on src table https
4902 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4903 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4904 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4905
4906 backend https
4907 mode tcp
4908 balance roundrobin
4909 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4910 stick on src
4911 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4912 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4913
4914 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4915
4916
4917stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4918 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4919 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4920 no | no | yes | yes
4921
4922 Arguments :
4923 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4924 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4925 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4926 server is selected.
4927
4928 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4929 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4930 the "stick-table" statement.
4931
4932 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4933 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4934 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4935 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4936 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4937 address.
4938
4939 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4940 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4941 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4942 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4943 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4944 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4945 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4946 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4947 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4948 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4949
4950 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4951 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4952 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4953 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4954 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4955 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4956 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4957
4958 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4959 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4960 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4961 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4962
4963 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4964 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4965 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4966 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4967 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4968 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4969 another protocol or access method.
4970
4971 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4972 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4973 the request.
4974
4975 Example :
4976 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4977 # last 30 minutes
4978 backend pop
4979 mode tcp
4980 balance roundrobin
4981 stick store-request src
4982 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4983 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4984 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4985
4986 backend smtp
4987 mode tcp
4988 balance roundrobin
4989 stick match src table pop
4990 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4991 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4992
4993 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4994 extraction.
4995
4996
4997stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
Willy Tarreau08d5f982010-06-06 13:34:54 +02004998 [expire <expire>] [nopurge] [store <data_type>]*
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004999 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
5000 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreauc00cdc22010-06-06 16:48:26 +02005001 no | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005002
5003 Arguments :
5004 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
5005 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
5006 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
5007 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
5008
5009 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
5010 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
5011 instance.
5012
5013 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
5014 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
5015 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
5016 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
5017 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
5018 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
5019 to 31 characters.
5020
5021 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
5022 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
5023 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
5024 increase.
5025
5026 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005027 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
5028 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
5029 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005030
5031 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
5032 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
5033 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
5034 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
5035 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
5036 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
5037 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
5038 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
5039 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
5040 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
5041 parameter (see below).
5042
5043 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
5044 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
5045 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
5046 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
5047 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
5048 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
5049 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
5050 if not expiration delay is specified.
5051
Willy Tarreau08d5f982010-06-06 13:34:54 +02005052 <data_type> is used to store additional information in the stick-table. This
5053 may be used by ACLs in order to control various criteria related
5054 to the activity of the client matching the stick-table. For each
5055 item specified here, the size of each entry will be inflated so
Willy Tarreau69b870f2010-06-06 14:30:13 +02005056 that the additional data can fit. At the moment, only "conn_cum"
5057 is supported, which can be used to store and retrieve the total
Willy Tarreau13c29de2010-06-06 16:40:39 +02005058 number of connections matching the entry since it was created. A
5059 "server_id" type is also supported but it's only for internal
5060 use for stick and store directives.
Willy Tarreau08d5f982010-06-06 13:34:54 +02005061
Willy Tarreauc00cdc22010-06-06 16:48:26 +02005062 There is only one stick-table per proxy. At the moment of writing this doc,
5063 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per proxy. If this happens
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005064 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
5065 reference it.
5066
5067 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
5068 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
5069 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
5070 as an exclusive stickiness.
5071
5072 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
5073 about time format.
5074
5075
Willy Tarreau1a687942010-05-23 22:40:30 +02005076tcp-request accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
5077 Accept an incoming connection if/unless a layer 4 condition is matched
5078 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5079 no | yes | yes | no
5080
5081 Immediately after acceptance of a new incoming connection, it is possible to
5082 evaluate some conditions to decide whether this connection must be accepted
5083 or dropped. Those conditions cannot make use of any data contents because the
5084 connection has not been read from yet, and the buffers are not yet allocated.
5085 This can be used to selectively and very quickly accept or drop connections
5086 from various sources with a very low overhead. If some contents need to be
5087 inspected in order to take the decision, the "tcp-request content" statements
5088 must be used instead.
5089
5090 This statement accepts the connection if the condition is true (when used
5091 with "if") or false (when used with "unless"). It is important to understand
5092 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5093 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5094 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5095
5096 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
5097 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5098
5099 If no "tcp-request" rules are matched, the default action is to accept the
5100 connection, which implies that the "tcp-request accept" statement will only
5101 make sense when combined with another "tcp-request reject" statement.
5102
5103 See section 7 about ACL usage.
5104
5105 See also : "tcp-request reject" and "tcp-request content"
5106
5107
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005108tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
5109 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5110 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5111 no | yes | yes | no
5112
5113 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
5114 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5115 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5116 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5117 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5118 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5119 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5120 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5121
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005122 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005123 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5124
5125 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
5126 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
5127 "reject" statement.
5128
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005129 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005130
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005131 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005132
5133
5134tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5135 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5136 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5137 no | yes | yes | no
5138
5139 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
5140 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5141 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5142 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5143 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5144 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5145 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5146 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5147
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005148 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005149 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5150
5151 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
5152 "accept".
5153
5154 Example:
5155 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
5156 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5157 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5158 tcp-request reject if content_present
5159
5160 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
5161 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5162 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5163 tcp-request accept if content_present
5164 tcp-request reject
5165
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005166 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005167
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005168 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005169
5170
5171tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
5172 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
5173 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5174 no | yes | yes | no
5175 Arguments :
5176 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5177 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5178 as explained at the top of this document.
5179
5180 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
5181 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
5182 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
5183 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
5184 data for at most the specified amount of time.
5185
5186 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
5187 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005188 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005189 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01005190 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
5191 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
5192 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
5193 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005194
5195 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
5196 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
5197 it pass through unaffected.
5198
5199 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
5200 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
5201 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005202 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005203 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5204 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5205 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5206
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005207 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005208 "timeout client".
5209
5210
Willy Tarreau1a687942010-05-23 22:40:30 +02005211tcp-request reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5212 Reject an incoming connection if/unless a layer 4 condition is matched
5213 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5214 no | yes | yes | no
5215
5216 Immediately after acceptance of a new incoming connection, it is possible to
5217 evaluate some conditions to decide whether this connection must be accepted
5218 or dropped. Those conditions cannot make use of any data contents because the
5219 connection has not been read from yet, and the buffers are not yet allocated.
5220 This can be used to selectively and very quickly accept or drop connections
5221 from various sources with a very low overhead. If some contents need to be
5222 inspected in order to take the decision, the "tcp-request content" statements
5223 must be used instead.
5224
5225 This statement rejects the connection if the condition is true (when used
5226 with "if") or false (when used with "unless"). It is important to understand
5227 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5228 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5229 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5230
5231 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
5232 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5233
5234 If no "tcp-request" rules are matched, the default action is to accept the
5235 connection, which implies that the "tcp-request accept" statement will only
5236 make sense when combined with another "tcp-request reject" statement.
5237
Willy Tarreau2799e982010-06-05 15:43:21 +02005238 Rejected connections do not even become a session, which is why they are
5239 accounted separately for in the stats, as "denied connections". They are not
5240 considered for the session rate-limit and are not logged either. The reason
5241 is that these rules should only be used to filter extremely high connection
Willy Tarreau1a687942010-05-23 22:40:30 +02005242 rates such as the ones encountered during a massive DDoS attack. Under these
5243 conditions, the simple action of logging each event would make the system
5244 collapse and would considerably lower the filtering capacity. If logging is
5245 absolutely desired, then "tcp-request content" rules should be used instead.
5246
5247 See section 7 about ACL usage.
5248
5249 See also : "tcp-request accept" and "tcp-request content"
5250
5251
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005252timeout check <timeout>
5253 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5254 established.
5255
5256 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5257 yes | no | yes | yes
5258 Arguments:
5259 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5260 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5261 as explained at the top of this document.
5262
5263 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5264 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5265 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5266 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005267 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5268 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5269 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005270
5271 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5272 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5273
5274 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5275 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005276 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005277
5278 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5279 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5280 forget about it.
5281
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005282 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5283 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005284
5285
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005286timeout client <timeout>
5287timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5288 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5289 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5290 yes | yes | yes | no
5291 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005292 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005293 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5294 as explained at the top of this document.
5295
5296 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5297 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5298 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5299 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5300 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5301 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5302 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5303 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005304 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005305 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5306 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5307
5308 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5309 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5310 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5311 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5312 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5313 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5314
5315 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5316 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5317 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5318
5319 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5320
5321
5322timeout connect <timeout>
5323timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5324 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5325 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5326 yes | no | yes | yes
5327 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005328 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005329 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5330 as explained at the top of this document.
5331
5332 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005333 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005334 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005335 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005336 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5337 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005338
5339 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5340 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5341 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5342 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5343 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5344 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5345
5346 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5347 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5348 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5349
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005350 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5351 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005352
5353
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005354timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5355 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5356 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5357 yes | yes | yes | yes
5358 Arguments :
5359 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5360 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5361 as explained at the top of this document.
5362
5363 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5364 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5365 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5366 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5367 once the request has started to present itself.
5368
5369 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5370 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5371 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5372 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5373 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5374
5375 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5376 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5377 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5378 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5379
5380 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5381 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5382 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5383 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5384 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02005385 with tens to hundreds of thousands of clients.
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005386
5387 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5388 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5389 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5390 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5391
5392 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5393
5394
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005395timeout http-request <timeout>
5396 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5397 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005398 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005399 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005400 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005401 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5402 as explained at the top of this document.
5403
5404 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5405 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5406 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5407 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5408 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5409 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5410 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5411 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5412
5413 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5414 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005415 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5416 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005417
5418 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5419 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5420 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5421 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5422 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5423
5424 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005425 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5426 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5427 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005428
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005429 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005430
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005431
5432timeout queue <timeout>
5433 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5434 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5435 yes | no | yes | yes
5436 Arguments :
5437 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5438 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5439 as explained at the top of this document.
5440
5441 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5442 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5443 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5444 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5445 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5446
5447 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5448 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5449 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5450 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5451
5452 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5453
5454
5455timeout server <timeout>
5456timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5457 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5458 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5459 yes | no | yes | yes
5460 Arguments :
5461 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5462 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5463 as explained at the top of this document.
5464
5465 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5466 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5467 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5468 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5469 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5470 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5471 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5472
5473 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5474 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5475 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5476 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5477 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005478 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005479 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005480 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005481
5482 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5483 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5484 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5485 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5486 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5487 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5488
5489 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5490 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5491 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5492
5493 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5494
5495
5496timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005497 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005498 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5499 yes | yes | yes | yes
5500 Arguments :
5501 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5502 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5503 as explained at the top of this document.
5504
5505 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5506 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5507 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5508
5509 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5510 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5511 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5512 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005513 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005514
5515 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5516
5517
5518transparent (deprecated)
5519 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5520 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005521 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005522 Arguments : none
5523
5524 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5525 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5526 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5527 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5528 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5529 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5530 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5531 appropriate server.
5532
5533 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5534
5535 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5536 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5537
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005538 See also: "option transparent"
5539
5540
5541use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5542use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005543 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005544 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5545 no | yes | yes | no
5546 Arguments :
5547 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5548
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005549 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005550
5551 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5552 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5553 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005554 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5555 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5556 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5557 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005558
5559 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5560 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5561 assign the backend.
5562
5563 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5564 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5565 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5566 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5567 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5568 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5569
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005570 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005571 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005572 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5573 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5574 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5575
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005576 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005577
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005578
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010055795. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005580------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005581
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005582The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5583which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5584arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5585settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5586after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5587Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5588address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005589
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005590 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005591 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005592
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005593The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005594
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005595addr <ipv4>
5596 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5597 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5598 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5599 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5600 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005601
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005602 Supported in default-server: No
5603
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005604backup
5605 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5606 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5607 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5608 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5609 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5610 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005611
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005612 Supported in default-server: No
5613
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005614check
5615 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5616 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5617 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5618 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5619 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5620 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5621 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5622 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5623 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005624 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5625 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005626
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005627 Supported in default-server: No
5628
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005629cookie <value>
5630 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5631 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5632 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5633 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5634 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5635 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5636 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5637
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005638 Supported in default-server: No
5639
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005640disabled
5641 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5642 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5643 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5644 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5645 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5646
5647 Supported in default-server: No
5648
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005649error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005650 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5651 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5652 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005653
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005654 Supported in default-server: Yes
5655
5656 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005657
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005658fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005659 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5660 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5661 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5662
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005663 Supported in default-server: Yes
5664
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005665id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005666 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5667 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5668 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005669
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005670 Supported in default-server: No
5671
5672inter <delay>
5673fastinter <delay>
5674downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005675 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5676 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5677 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5678 between checks depending on the server state :
5679
5680 Server state | Interval used
5681 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5682 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5683 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5684 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5685 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5686 or yet unchecked. |
5687 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5688 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5689 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005690
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005691 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5692 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5693 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5694 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5695 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5696 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5697 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5698 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5699 servers.
5700
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005701 Supported in default-server: Yes
5702
5703maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005704 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5705 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5706 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5707 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5708 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5709 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5710 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5711 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5712
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005713 Supported in default-server: Yes
5714
5715maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005716 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5717 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5718 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5719 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5720 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5721 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5722 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5723
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005724 Supported in default-server: Yes
5725
5726minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005727 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5728 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5729 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5730 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5731 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5732 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005733 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005734 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005735
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005736 Supported in default-server: Yes
5737
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005738observe <mode>
5739 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5740 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5741 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5742 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5743 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5744 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5745 headers, a timeout, etc.
5746
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005747 Supported in default-server: No
5748
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005749 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5750
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005751on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005752 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5753 Currently, four modes are available:
5754 - fastinter: force fastinter
5755 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5756 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5757 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5758 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5759
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005760 Supported in default-server: Yes
5761
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005762 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5763
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005764port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005765 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5766 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5767 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5768 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5769 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5770 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5771
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005772 Supported in default-server: Yes
5773
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005774redir <prefix>
5775 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5776 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5777 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5778 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5779 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5780 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5781 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5782 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005783 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005784 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5785 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5786 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5787 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5788 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5789
5790 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5791
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005792 Supported in default-server: No
5793
5794rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005795 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5796 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5797 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5798
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005799 Supported in default-server: Yes
5800
5801slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005802 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5803 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5804 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5805 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5806 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5807 parameters :
5808
5809 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5810 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5811
5812 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5813 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5814 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5815 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5816
5817 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5818 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5819 seen as failed.
5820
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005821 Supported in default-server: Yes
5822
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005823source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02005824source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005825source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005826 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5827 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5828 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5829 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5830
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005831 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5832 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5833 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5834 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5835 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5836 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5837 server.
5838
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005839 Supported in default-server: No
5840
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005841track [<proxy>/]<server>
5842 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5843 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5844 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5845 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5846 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5847
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005848 Supported in default-server: No
5849
5850weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005851 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5852 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5853 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005854 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5855 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5856 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5857 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5858 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5859 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005860
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005861 Supported in default-server: Yes
5862
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005863
58646. HTTP header manipulation
5865---------------------------
5866
5867In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5868response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5869request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5870which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5871against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5872to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5873passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5874headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5875never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5876
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005877There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5878(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5879rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5880messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5881in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005882happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005883add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5884normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5885
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005886This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5887in section 4.2 :
5888
5889 - reqadd <string>
5890 - reqallow <search>
5891 - reqiallow <search>
5892 - reqdel <search>
5893 - reqidel <search>
5894 - reqdeny <search>
5895 - reqideny <search>
5896 - reqpass <search>
5897 - reqipass <search>
5898 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5899 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5900 - reqtarpit <search>
5901 - reqitarpit <search>
5902 - rspadd <string>
5903 - rspdel <search>
5904 - rspidel <search>
5905 - rspdeny <search>
5906 - rspideny <search>
5907 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5908 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5909
5910With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5911is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5912parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5913prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5914Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5915
5916 \t for a tab
5917 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5918 \n for a new line (LF)
5919 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5920 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5921 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5922 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5923 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5924
5925The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5926portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5927above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5928regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
59299 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5930is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5931
5932The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5933after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5934
5935Notes related to these keywords :
5936---------------------------------
5937 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5938 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5939 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5940
5941 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5942 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5943 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5944
5945 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5946 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5947 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5948 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5949 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5950
5951 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5952 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5953 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5954 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5955 useless headers before adding new ones.
5956
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005957 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005958 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5959
5960 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5961 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5962 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5963
5964 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5965 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005966 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005967
5968
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010059697. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5970------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005971
5972The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5973content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5974from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5975simple :
5976
5977 - define test criteria with sets of values
5978 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5979
5980The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5981
5982In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5983
5984 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5985
5986This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5987Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5988and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5989an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5990of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5991
5992ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5993'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5994which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5995
5996There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5997performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5998
5999The following ACL flags are currently supported :
6000
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02006001 -i : ignore case during matching of all subsequent patterns.
6002 -f : load patterns from a file.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006003 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
6004
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02006005The "-f" flag is special as it loads all of the lines it finds in the file
6006specified in argument and loads all of them before continuing. It is even
6007possible to pass multiple "-f" arguments if the patterns are to be loaded from
Willy Tarreau58215a02010-05-13 22:07:43 +02006008multiple files. Empty lines as well as lines beginning with a sharp ('#') will
6009be ignored. All leading spaces and tabs will be stripped. If it is absolutely
6010needed to insert a valid pattern beginning with a sharp, just prefix it with a
6011space so that it is not taken for a comment. Depending on the data type and
6012match method, haproxy may load the lines into a binary tree, allowing very fast
6013lookups. This is true for IPv4 and exact string matching. In this case,
6014duplicates will automatically be removed. Also, note that the "-i" flag applies
6015to subsequent entries and not to entries loaded from files preceeding it. For
6016instance :
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02006017
6018 acl valid-ua hdr(user-agent) -f exact-ua.lst -i -f generic-ua.lst test
6019
6020In this example, each line of "exact-ua.lst" will be exactly matched against
6021the "user-agent" header of the request. Then each line of "generic-ua" will be
6022case-insensitively matched. Then the word "test" will be insensitively matched
6023too.
6024
6025Note that right now it is difficult for the ACL parsers to report errors, so if
6026a file is unreadable or unparsable, the most you'll get is a parse error in the
6027ACL. Thus, file-based ACLs should only be produced by reliable processes.
6028
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006029Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006030
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006031 - integers or integer ranges
6032 - strings
6033 - regular expressions
6034 - IP addresses and networks
6035
6036
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060377.1. Matching integers
6038----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006039
6040Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
6041that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
6042expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
6043may be omitted.
6044
6045For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
6046unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
6047representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
6048
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006049As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
6050two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
6051instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
6052ranges and operators.
6053
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006054For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006055operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
6056Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
6057of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006058
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006059Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006060
6061 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
6062 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
6063 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
6064 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
6065 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
6066
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006067For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006068
6069 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
6070
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006071This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
6072
6073 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
6074
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006075
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060767.2. Matching strings
6077---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006078
6079String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
6080exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
6081characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
6082string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
6083to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006084before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006085
6086
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060877.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
6088-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006089
6090Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
6091they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
6092possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
6093passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
6094the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006095the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
6096match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006097
6098
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060997.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
6100----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006101
6102IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
6103netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
6104within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01006105host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006106difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
6107at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
6108does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
6109parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006110
6111
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061127.5. Available matching criteria
6113--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006114
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061157.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
6116------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006117
6118A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
6119analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
6120addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
6121
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006122always_false
6123 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6124 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6125
6126always_true
6127 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6128 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6129
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006130avg_queue <integer>
6131avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
6132 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
6133 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
6134 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
6135 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
6136 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
6137 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
6138 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
6139 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
6140 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
6141 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
6142 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01006143
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006144be_conn <integer>
6145be_conn(frontend) <integer>
6146 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
6147 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
6148 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6149 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
6150 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006151
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006152be_sess_rate <integer>
6153be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
6154 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
6155 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
6156 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
6157 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
6158 sucking of an online dictionary).
6159
6160 Example :
6161 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
6162 backend dynamic
6163 mode http
6164 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
6165 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006166
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006167connslots <integer>
6168connslots(backend) <integer>
6169 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006170 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006171 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
6172
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006173 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
6174 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006175
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006176 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006177 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
6178 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
6179 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
6180 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
6181 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006182 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006183
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006184 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
6185 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
6186 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
6187 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006188
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006189dst <ip_address>
6190 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
6191 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006192
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006193dst_conn <integer>
6194 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
6195 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
6196 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
6197 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
6198 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
6199 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
6200
6201dst_port <integer>
6202 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
6203 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
6204
6205fe_conn <integer>
6206fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
6207 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
6208 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
6209 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6210 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
6211 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
6212 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
6213 criteria.
6214
6215fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01006216 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006217 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006218
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006219fe_sess_rate <integer>
6220fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
6221 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
6222 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
6223 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
6224 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
6225 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
6226 the rate to go down below the limit.
6227
6228 Example :
6229 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
6230 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
6231 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
6232 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
6233 frontend mail
6234 bind :25
6235 mode tcp
6236 maxconn 100
6237 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
6238 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
6239 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
6240 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006241
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006242nbsrv <integer>
6243nbsrv(backend) <integer>
6244 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
6245 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
6246 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
6247 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
6248 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006249
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006250queue <integer>
6251queue(frontend) <integer>
6252 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
6253 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
6254 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
6255 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
6256 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
6257 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
6258 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
6259
6260so_id <integer>
6261 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
6262
6263src <ip_address>
6264 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
6265 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
6266 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
6267
Willy Tarreaua975b8f2010-06-05 19:13:27 +02006268src_count <integer>
6269src_count(backend) <integer>
6270 Returns the number of occurrences of the source IPv4 address in the current
6271 backend's stick-table or in the designated stick-table. If the address is not
6272 found, zero is returned.
6273
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006274src_port <integer>
6275 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006276
Willy Tarreaua975b8f2010-06-05 19:13:27 +02006277src_update_count <integer>
6278src_update_count(backend) <integer>
6279 Creates or updates the entry associated to the source IPv4 address in the
6280 current backend's stick-table or in the designated stick-table. This table
6281 must be configured to store the "conn_cum" data type, otherwise the match
6282 will be ignored. The current count is incremented by one, and the expiration
6283 timer refreshed. The updated count is returned, so this match can't return
6284 zero. This is used to reject service abusers based on their source address.
6285
6286 Example :
6287 # This frontend limits incoming SSH connections to 3 per 10 second for
6288 # each source address, and rejects excess connections until a 10 second
6289 # silence is observed. At most 20 addresses are tracked.
6290 listen ssh
6291 bind :22
6292 mode tcp
6293 maxconn 100
6294 stick-table type ip size 20 expire 10s store conn_cum
6295 tcp-request content reject if { src_update_count gt 3 }
6296 server local 127.0.0.1:22
6297
Willy Tarreau0b1cd942010-05-16 22:18:27 +02006298srv_is_up(<server>)
6299srv_is_up(<backend>/<server>)
6300 Returns true when the designated server is UP, and false when it is either
6301 DOWN or in maintenance mode. If <backend> is omitted, then the server is
6302 looked up in the current backend. The function takes no arguments since it
6303 is used as a boolean. It is mainly used to take action based on an external
6304 status reported via a health check (eg: a geographical site's availability).
6305 Another possible use which is more of a hack consists in using dummy servers
6306 as boolean variables that can be enabled or disabled from the CLI, so that
6307 rules depending on those ACLs can be tweaked in realtime.
6308
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006309
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063107.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6311-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006312
6313A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6314during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6315through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6316for more detailed information on the subject.
6317
6318req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006319 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006320 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6321 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6322 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6323 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6324 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6325 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6326
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006327req_proto_http
6328 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6329 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006330 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006331 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6332 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6333
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006334req_rdp_cookie <string>
6335req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6336 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6337 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6338 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6339 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6340 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6341 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6342 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6343 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6344
6345req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6346req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6347 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6348 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6349 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6350 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6351 cookies.
6352
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006353req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6354 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6355 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6356 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6357 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6358 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6359 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6360 with TCP request content inspection.
6361
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006362wait_end
6363 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6364 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6365 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6366 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6367 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6368 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6369 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6370 inspection.
6371
6372 Examples :
6373 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6374 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6375 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6376
6377 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6378 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6379 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6380 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6381 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6382 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6383 tcp-request content reject
6384
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006385
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063867.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6387--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006388
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006389A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006390application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6391read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6392than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6393
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006394hdr <string>
6395hdr(header) <string>
6396 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6397 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6398 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6399 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6400 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6401
6402 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6403 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6404 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6405
6406 hdr(Connection) -i close
6407
6408hdr_beg <string>
6409hdr_beg(header) <string>
6410 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6411 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6412 response headers sent by the server.
6413
6414hdr_cnt <integer>
6415hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6416 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6417 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6418 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6419 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6420 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6421 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6422 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6423
6424hdr_dir <string>
6425hdr_dir(header) <string>
6426 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6427 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6428 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6429 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6430 headers sent by the server.
6431
6432hdr_dom <string>
6433hdr_dom(header) <string>
6434 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6435 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6436 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6437 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6438 server.
6439
6440hdr_end <string>
6441hdr_end(header) <string>
6442 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6443 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6444 response headers sent by the server.
6445
6446hdr_ip <ip_address>
6447hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6448 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6449 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6450 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6451 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6452
6453hdr_reg <regex>
6454hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6455 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6456 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6457 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6458 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6459 response headers sent by the server.
6460
6461hdr_sub <string>
6462hdr_sub(header) <string>
6463 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6464 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6465 response headers sent by the server.
6466
6467hdr_val <integer>
6468hdr_val(header) <integer>
6469 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6470 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6471 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6472 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6473
6474http_auth(userlist)
6475http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6476 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6477 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6478 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6479 of specified groups.
6480
6481 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6482
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006483method <string>
6484 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6485 already check for most common methods.
6486
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006487path <string>
6488 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6489 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6490 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6491
6492path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006493 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6494 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006495
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006496path_dir <string>
6497 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6498 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6499 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6500 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6501
6502path_dom <string>
6503 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6504 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6505 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6506
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006507path_end <string>
6508 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6509 control file name extension.
6510
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006511path_reg <regex>
6512 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6513 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6514 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6515
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006516path_sub <string>
6517 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6518 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6519 "path_dir".
6520
6521req_ver <string>
6522 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6523 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6524
6525status <integer>
6526 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6527 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6528 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6529
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006530url <string>
6531 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6532 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6533
6534url_beg <string>
6535 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6536 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6537
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006538url_dir <string>
6539 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6540 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6541 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6542 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6543
6544url_dom <string>
6545 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6546 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6547 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6548
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006549url_end <string>
6550 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6551 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006552
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006553url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006554 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6555 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006556 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006557
6558url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006559 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6560 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006561 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006562 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006563
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006564url_reg <regex>
6565 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6566 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6567 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006568
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006569url_sub <string>
6570 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6571 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006572
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006573
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065747.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6575---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006576
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006577Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6578every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02006579order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006580
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006581ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6582---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006583FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006584HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006585HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6586HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006587HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6588HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6589HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6590HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6591LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006592METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6593METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6594METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6595METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6596METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6597METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006598RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006599REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006600TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006601WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6602---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006603
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006604
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066057.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6606----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006607
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006608Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6609combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006610
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006611 - AND (implicit)
6612 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6613 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006614
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006615A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006616
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006617 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006618
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006619Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6620indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006621
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006622For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6623"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6624requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6625is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006626
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006627 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6628 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6629 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6630 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006631
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006632To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6633and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006634
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006635 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6636 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6637 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6638 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006639
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006640 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6641 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6642 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6643 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006644
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006645It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6646expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6647be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6648the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6649
6650 The following rule :
6651
6652 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6653 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6654
6655 Can also be written that way :
6656
6657 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6658
6659It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6660to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6661simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6662sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6663good use is the following :
6664
6665 With named ACLs :
6666
6667 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6668 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6669 monitor fail if site_dead
6670
6671 With anonymous ACLs :
6672
6673 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6674
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006675See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006676
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006677
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010066787.8. Pattern extraction
6679-----------------------
6680
6681The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6682response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6683for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6684
6685All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6686"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6687begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6688arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6689much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6690equivalent used in ACLs.
6691
6692The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6693
6694 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6695 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6696
6697 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6698 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6699 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6700 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6701
6702 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6703 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6704 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6705 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6706 type integer and only works with such tables.
6707
Willy Tarreau4a568972010-05-12 08:08:50 +02006708 hdr(name) This extracts the last occurrence of header <name> in an HTTP
6709 request and converts it to an IP address. This IP address is
6710 then used to match the table. A typical use is with the
6711 x-forwarded-for header.
6712
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006713
6714The currently available list of transformations include :
6715
6716 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6717 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6718 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6719
6720 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6721 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6722 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6723
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006724 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6725 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6726 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6727 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6728 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6729
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006730
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067318. Logging
6732----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006733
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006734One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6735provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6736very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6737provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6738state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006739to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006740headers.
6741
6742In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6743about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6744send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6745
6746 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6747 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6748 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6749 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6750 at the termination.
6751
6752The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6753allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6754as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6755while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6756real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6757delay.
6758
6759
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067608.1. Log levels
6761---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006762
6763TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6764source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6765HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6766in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6767particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006768syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006769facilities.
6770
6771
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067728.2. Log formats
6773----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006774
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006775HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006776and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6777the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6778formats are the following ones :
6779
6780 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6781 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6782 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6783 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6784 extents.
6785
6786 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6787 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6788 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6789 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6790 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6791
6792 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6793 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6794 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6795 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6796 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6797
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006798 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6799 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6800 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6801 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6802
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006803Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6804specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6805field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6806servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6807always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6808identifier.
6809
6810Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6811 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6812 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6813 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6814 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6815
6816
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068178.2.1. Default log format
6818-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006819
6820This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6821as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6822format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6823
6824 Example :
6825 listen www
6826 mode http
6827 log global
6828 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6829
6830 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6831 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6832 (www/HTTP)
6833
6834 Field Format Extract from the example above
6835 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6836 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6837 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6838 4 'to' to
6839 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6840 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6841
6842Detailed fields description :
6843 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6844 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6845 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6846 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6847 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6848 and processed the connection.
6849 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6850
6851It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6852will eventually disappear.
6853
6854
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068558.2.2. TCP log format
6856---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006857
6858The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6859is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6860information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6861counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6862emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6863environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6864the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6865sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006866specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6867not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6868fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6869marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006870
6871 Example :
6872 frontend fnt
6873 mode tcp
6874 option tcplog
6875 log global
6876 default_backend bck
6877
6878 backend bck
6879 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6880
6881 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6882 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6883 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6884
6885 Field Format Extract from the example above
6886 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6887 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6888 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6889 4 frontend_name fnt
6890 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6891 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6892 7 bytes_read* 212
6893 8 termination_state --
6894 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6895 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6896
6897Detailed fields description :
6898 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6899 connection to haproxy.
6900
6901 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6902
6903 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6904 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6905 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6906 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6907
6908 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6909 and processed the connection.
6910
6911 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6912 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6913 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6914 applications.
6915
6916 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6917 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6918 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6919 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6920 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6921
6922 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6923 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6924 See "Timers" below for more details.
6925
6926 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6927 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6928 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6929 "Timers" below for more details.
6930
6931 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6932 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6933 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6934 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6935 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6936 details.
6937
6938 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6939 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6940 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6941 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6942 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6943
6944 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6945 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6946 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6947 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6948 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6949 for more details.
6950
6951 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6952 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6953 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6954 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6955 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006956 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006957
6958 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6959 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6960 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6961 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6962 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6963 caused by a denial of service attack.
6964
6965 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6966 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6967 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6968 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6969 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6970 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6971 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6972 denial of service attack.
6973
6974 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6975 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6976 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6977 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6978 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6979 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6980 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6981 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6982 be processed than on other servers.
6983
6984 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6985 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6986 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6987 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6988 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6989 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6990 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6991 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6992 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6993 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6994 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6995 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6996 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6997
6998 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6999 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
7000 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
7001 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
7002 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
7003 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
7004 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
7005 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
7006
7007 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7008 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
7009 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
7010 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
7011 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
7012 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
7013 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
7014 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
7015 occurs.
7016
7017
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070188.2.3. HTTP log format
7019----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007020
7021The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
7022is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
7023the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
7024are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
7025emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
7026generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
7027"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
7028which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007029frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
7030is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007031
7032Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
7033slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
7034with a star ('*') after the field name below.
7035
7036 Example :
7037 frontend http-in
7038 mode http
7039 option httplog
7040 log global
7041 default_backend bck
7042
7043 backend static
7044 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
7045
7046 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
7047 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
7048 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007049 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007050
7051 Field Format Extract from the example above
7052 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
7053 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
7054 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
7055 4 frontend_name http-in
7056 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
7057 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
7058 7 status_code 200
7059 8 bytes_read* 2750
7060 9 captured_request_cookie -
7061 10 captured_response_cookie -
7062 11 termination_state ----
7063 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
7064 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
7065 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
7066 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
7067 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007068
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007069
7070Detailed fields description :
7071 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
7072 connection to haproxy.
7073
7074 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
7075
7076 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
7077 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
7078 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
7079 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
7080 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
7081
7082 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
7083 and processed the connection.
7084
7085 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
7086 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
7087 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
7088
7089 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
7090 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
7091 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
7092 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
7093 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
7094 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
7095
7096 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
7097 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
7098 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
7099 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
7100 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
7101 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
7102
7103 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
7104 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
7105 See "Timers" below for more details.
7106
7107 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
7108 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
7109 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
7110 below for more details.
7111
7112 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
7113 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
7114 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
7115 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
7116 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
7117 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
7118 for more details.
7119
7120 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
7121 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
7122 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
7123 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
7124 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
7125 details.
7126
7127 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
7128 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
7129 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
7130
7131 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
7132 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
7133 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
7134 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
7135 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
7136 overflowing.
7137
7138 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
7139 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
7140 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
7141 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
7142 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
7143 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
7144 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
7145 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7146
7147 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
7148 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
7149 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
7150 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
7151 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
7152 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
7153 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
7154 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7155
7156 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
7157 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
7158 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
7159 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
7160 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
7161 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
7162 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
7163
7164 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
7165 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
7166 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
7167 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
7168 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007169 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007170 system.
7171
7172 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
7173 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
7174 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
7175 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
7176 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
7177 caused by a denial of service attack.
7178
7179 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
7180 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
7181 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
7182 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
7183 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
7184 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
7185 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
7186 denial of service attack.
7187
7188 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
7189 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
7190 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
7191 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
7192 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
7193 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
7194 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
7195 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
7196 processed than on other servers.
7197
7198 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
7199 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
7200 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
7201 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
7202 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
7203 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
7204 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
7205 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
7206 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
7207 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
7208 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
7209 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
7210 should not be attributed to the logged server.
7211
7212 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7213 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
7214 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
7215 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
7216 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
7217 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
7218 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
7219 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
7220
7221 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7222 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
7223 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
7224 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
7225 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
7226 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
7227 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
7228 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
7229 occurs.
7230
7231 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
7232 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
7233 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
7234 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
7235 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
7236 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
7237 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
7238 cookies" below for more details.
7239
7240 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
7241 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
7242 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
7243 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
7244 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
7245 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
7246 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
7247 and cookies" below for more details.
7248
7249 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
7250 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
7251 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
7252 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
7253 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
7254 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
7255 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
7256 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
7257
7258
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072598.3. Advanced logging options
7260-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007261
7262Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
7263just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
7264options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
7265for more information about their usage.
7266
7267
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072688.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
7269------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007270
7271It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
7272haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
7273commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
7274monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
7275ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
7276
7277 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
7278 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
7279 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
7280 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
7281
7282 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
7283 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
7284 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
7285 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
7286 such as other load-balancers.
7287
7288 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
7289 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
7290 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
7291
7292
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072938.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
7294----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007295
7296The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
7297what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
7298or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
7299"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
7300just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
7301log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
7302after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
7303is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
7304with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
7305with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
7306
7307
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073088.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
7309------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007310
7311Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
7312for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7313"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7314retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7315raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7316a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7317file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7318you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7319"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7320
7321
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073228.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7323--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007324
7325Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7326multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7327them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7328"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7329logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7330error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7331and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7332too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7333useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7334alternative.
7335
7336
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073378.4. Timing events
7338------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007339
7340Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7341reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7342the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7343frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7344mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7345
7346 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7347 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7348 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7349 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7350 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7351
7352 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7353 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7354 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7355 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7356 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7357
7358 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7359 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7360 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7361 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7362 connection never established.
7363
7364 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7365 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7366 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7367 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7368 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7369 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7370 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7371 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7372 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7373 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7374 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7375
7376 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7377 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7378 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7379 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7380 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7381
7382 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7383
7384 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7385 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7386 negative.
7387
7388These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7389protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7390that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007391due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007392close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7393session has been aborted on timeout.
7394
7395Most common cases :
7396
7397 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7398 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7399 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7400 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7401 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7402 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7403 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7404 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7405 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
Patrick Mezard105faca2010-06-12 17:02:46 +02007406 connections have been accepted at once. Setting "option http-server-close"
7407 may display larger request times since "Tq" also measures the time spent
7408 waiting for additional requests.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007409
7410 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7411 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7412 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7413 of ms on remote networks.
7414
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007415 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7416 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7417 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007418
7419 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7420 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7421 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7422 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7423 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7424 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7425 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7426 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7427 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7428 to the server until another one is released.
7429
7430Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7431
7432 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7433 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7434 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7435
7436 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7437 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7438 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7439
7440 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7441 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7442 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7443 flags.
7444
7445 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7446 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7447 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7448 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7449 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7450 the client connection was maintained open.
7451
7452 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7453 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7454 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7455 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7456
7457
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074588.5. Session state at disconnection
7459-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007460
7461TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7462"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
74632-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7464each of which has a special meaning :
7465
7466 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7467 session to terminate :
7468
7469 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7470
7471 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7472 server explicitly refused it.
7473
7474 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7475 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7476 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7477 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7478 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7479 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7480
7481 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7482 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7483 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7484 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7485 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7486
7487 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7488 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7489 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7490 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7491 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7492
7493 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7494 send or receive data.
7495
7496 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7497 send or receive data.
7498
7499 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7500 with nothing left in the buffers.
7501
7502 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7503
7504 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7505 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7506
7507 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7508 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7509 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7510 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7511 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7512
7513 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7514 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7515
7516 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7517 server (HTTP only).
7518
7519 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7520
7521 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7522 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7523 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7524
7525 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7526 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7527 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7528
7529 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7530
7531 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7532 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7533
7534 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7535 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7536 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7537
7538 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7539 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02007540 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, persistence conditionally
7541 ignored, or an attack.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007542
7543 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7544 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7545 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7546 another server.
7547
7548 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7549 server.
7550
7551 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7552
7553 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7554 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7555
7556 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7557
7558 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7559 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7560 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7561
7562 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7563
7564 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7565 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7566
7567 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7568
7569 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7570
7571The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7572happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7573helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7574starvation, attacks, etc...
7575
7576The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7577alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7578easier finding and understanding.
7579
7580 Flags Reason
7581
7582 -- Normal termination.
7583
7584 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7585 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7586 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7587 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7588
7589 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7590 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7591 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7592 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7593 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7594 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007595
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007596 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7597 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7598 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7599
7600 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7601 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7602 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7603
7604 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7605 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7606 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7607 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7608 the server takes too long to respond.
7609
7610 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7611 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7612 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7613 long a time to respond.
7614
7615 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7616 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7617 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7618 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7619 and the client.
7620
7621 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7622 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7623 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7624 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7625 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7626 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7627
7628 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7629 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007630 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7631 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7632 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7633 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007634
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007635 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007636 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7637 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7638 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7639 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7640 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7641
7642 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7643 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7644 503 or 504 here.
7645
7646 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7647 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7648 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7649 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7650 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7651
7652 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7653 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007654 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007655 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7656 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7657
7658 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7659 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7660 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7661 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7662 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7663 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7664 between haproxy and the server.
7665
7666 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7667 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7668 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7669 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7670 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7671 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7672 solution is to fix the application.
7673
7674 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7675 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7676 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7677 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7678 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7679 external attacks.
7680
7681 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7682 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7683 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7684 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7685 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7686
7687 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7688 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7689 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7690 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7691 containing unauthorized characters.
7692
7693 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7694 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7695 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7696 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7697
7698 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7699 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7700 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7701 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7702
7703 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7704 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7705 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7706 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7707
7708
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077098.6. Non-printable characters
7710-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007711
7712In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7713consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7714converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7715prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7716being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7717escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7718is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7719'}' when logging headers.
7720
7721Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7722issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7723containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7724
7725Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7726the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7727performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7728
7729
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077308.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7731---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007732
7733Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7734achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007735section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007736cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7737the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7738the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007739locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007740not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7741user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7742a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7743wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7744
7745 Examples :
7746 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7747 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7748
7749 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7750 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7751
7752
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077538.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7754---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007755
7756Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7757proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7758the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7759server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7760
7761Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7762response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007763section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007764
7765It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007766time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7767appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007768are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7769and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7770follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7771request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7772in the logs.
7773
7774 Example :
7775 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7776 listen proxy-out
7777 mode http
7778 option httplog
7779 option logasap
7780 log global
7781 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7782
7783 # log the name of the virtual server
7784 capture request header Host len 20
7785
7786 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7787 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7788
7789 # log the beginning of the referrer
7790 capture request header Referer len 20
7791
7792 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7793 capture response header Server len 20
7794
7795 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7796 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7797
7798 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7799 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7800
7801 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7802 capture response header Via len 20
7803
7804 # log the URL location during a redirection
7805 capture response header Location len 20
7806
7807 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7808 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7809 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7810 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7811 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7812
7813 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7814 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7815 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7816 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007817 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007818
7819 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7820 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7821 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7822 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7823 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007824 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007825
7826
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020078278.9. Examples of logs
7828---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007829
7830These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7831them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7832reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7833
7834 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7835 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7836 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7837
7838 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7839 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7840
7841 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7842 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7843 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7844
7845 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7846 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7847
7848 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7849 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7850 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7851
7852 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007853 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007854 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7855 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7856
7857 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7858 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7859 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7860
7861 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7862 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7863 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7864 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7865 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7866 to return the 502 and not the server.
7867
7868 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007869 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007870
7871 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7872 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7873 Nothing was sent to any server.
7874
7875 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7876 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7877
7878 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7879 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7880 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7881 send a 408 return code to the client.
7882
7883 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7884 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7885
7886 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7887 5 seconds ("c----").
7888
7889 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7890 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007891 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007892
7893 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007894 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007895 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7896 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7897 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7898 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7899 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007900
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007901
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020079029. Statistics and monitoring
7903----------------------------
7904
7905It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7906mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7907CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7908Unix socket.
7909
7910
79119.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007912---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007913
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007914The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7915page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7916
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007917 0. pxname: proxy name
7918 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7919 for server)
7920 2. qcur: current queued requests
7921 3. qmax: max queued requests
7922 4. scur: current sessions
7923 5. smax: max sessions
7924 6. slim: sessions limit
7925 7. stot: total sessions
7926 8. bin: bytes in
7927 9. bout: bytes out
7928 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007929 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007930 12. ereq: request errors
7931 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007932 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007933 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7934 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007935 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007936 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7937 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7938 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7939 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7940 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7941 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7942 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7943 25. qlimit: queue limit
7944 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7945 27. iid: unique proxy id
7946 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7947 29. throttle: warm up status
7948 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7949 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007950 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007951 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7952 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7953 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007954 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007955 UNK -> unknown
7956 INI -> initializing
7957 SOCKERR -> socket error
7958 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7959 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7960 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7961 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7962 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7963 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7964 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7965 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7966 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7967 disable-on-404
7968 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7969 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7970 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007971 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7972 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007973 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7974 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7975 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7976 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7977 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7978 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007979 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7980 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7981 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7982 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007983 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7984 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007985
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007986
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020079879.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007988-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007989
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007990The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007991must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7992is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7993a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7994risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7995followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7996given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7997then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7998to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007999
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008000It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
8001on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
8002own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01008003
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01008004clear counters
8005 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
8006 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
8007 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
8008 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
8009 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
8010
8011clear counters all
8012 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
8013 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
8014 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
8015
8016disable server <backend>/<server>
8017 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
8018 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
8019 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
8020 during the maintenance.
8021
8022 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
8023 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
8024
8025 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
8026 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
8027
8028 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
8029 level "admin".
8030
8031enable server <backend>/<server>
8032 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
8033 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
8034
8035 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
8036 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
8037
8038 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
8039 level "admin".
8040
8041get weight <backend>/<server>
8042 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
8043 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
8044 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
8045 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
8046 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
8047 dash ('#').
8048
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008049help
8050 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
8051 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01008052
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008053prompt
8054 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
8055 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
8056 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
8057 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
8058 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
8059 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
8060 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
8061 command.
8062
8063quit
8064 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01008065
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01008066set timeout cli <delay>
8067 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
8068 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
8069 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
8070
8071set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
8072 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
8073 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
8074 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
8075 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
8076 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
8077 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
8078 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
8079 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
8080 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
8081 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
8082 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
8083 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
8084 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
8085 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
8086
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01008087show errors [<iid>]
8088 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
8089 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02008090 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
8091 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
8092 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01008093
8094 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
8095 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
8096 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
8097 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
8098 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
8099 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
8100 are reported too.
8101
8102 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
8103 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
8104 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
8105 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
8106 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
8107 code.
8108
8109 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
8110 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
8111 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
8112 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
8113 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
8114 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
8115 line.
8116
8117 Example :
8118 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
8119 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
8120 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
8121 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
8122
8123 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
8124 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
8125 00038 Location: blah\r\n
8126 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
8127 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
8128 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
8129 00204+ minal\r\n
8130 00211 \r\n
8131
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02008132 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01008133 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
8134 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
8135 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
8136 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
8137 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
8138 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01008139
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008140show info
8141 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
8142
8143show sess
8144 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02008145 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
8146 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
8147
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01008148show sess <id>
8149 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
8150 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
8151 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
8152 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
8153 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
8154 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008155
8156show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
8157 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
8158 possible to dump only selected items :
8159 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
8160 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
8161 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
8162 for example:
8163 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
8164 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
8165 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
8166
8167 Example :
8168 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
8169 Name: HAProxy
8170 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
8171 Release_date: 2009/09/23
8172 Nbproc: 1
8173 Process_num: 1
8174 (...)
8175
8176 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
8177 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
8178 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
8179 (...)
8180 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
8181
8182 $
8183
8184 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
8185 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
8186 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
8187 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01008188 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008189
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02008190
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01008191/*
8192 * Local variables:
8193 * fill-column: 79
8194 * End:
8195 */